Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.Introduction In this tutorial. 1 . you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. Finally.

2 .

Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. such as mechanical equipment. such as duct. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Add more detailed modelling elements. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. electrical. and piping. and plumbing fixtures. and plumbing engineering workflows. 3 .Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Add basic MEP elements. electrical panels. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. Germany. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. fixtures.

Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Metric file names have an _m suffix. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. Metric: files for users working with metric units. and tags. Contact your CAD manager for more information. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. templates. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. In this exercise. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. you learn where the training files are located. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. annotations. such as templates and families. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. After completing each exercise. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. So. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Create detail views. is located and accessed in the training files location.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. however. to provide a richer and more finished design. and sheets to document the project. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. When you install the training files as instructed. when you add ductwork. you can choose to save your work. views. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. For example. For example. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. your Training folder may be in a different location. NOTE Depending on your installation. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Create schedules. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. On the Contents tab. as well as how to open and save them. You do not design entire systems. However. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . When you open a training file.

A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. a list of file types displays. verify that Project Files (*. and click Save. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. double-click Imperial or Metric. You may close the file with or without saving changes. 3 In the right pane. select the folder in which to save the new file.rvt) is selected. Accessing Training Files | 5 . A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. enter the new file name. and click the Training Files icon. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.rvt. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. if you open settings.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. click ➤ Save As. scroll down. and you can open any supported file type. 8 If you have made changes.rvt and make changes. you are prompted to save the changes. For Files of type. For example. 4 Click the training file name. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. For File name. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. and click Open. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. the Open dialog displays. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

6 .

Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. drawings. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. 2D and 3D view. the door retains this relationship to the partition. As you work in drawing and schedule views. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. quantities. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. scope. If you move the partition. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. and plans. hence. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. drawing sheets. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and phases when you need it. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. In this case.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. the parameter is one of association or connection. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. the hierarchy of elements. In this case. and schedules required for a building project. every drawing sheet. sections. the operation of the software is parametric. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. schedules. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. ■ ■ 7 . You learn the terminology. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. If the length of the elevation is changed. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In the Revit MEP model. the floor or roof remains connected. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation.

and reference planes are datum elements. The second is its approach to propagating building changes.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. levels. and electrical panels. and keynotes are annotation elements. For example. They display in relevant views of the design. boilers. ducts. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. sinks. For example. When you change something. For example. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. grids. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tags. Datum elements help to define project context. dimensions. and 2D detail components. dimensions. and electrical panels. filled regions. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. walls and ceilings are hosts. They help to describe or document the design. sinks. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. ducts. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Examples include detail lines. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. tags. sprinklers. For example. For example. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. boilers. sprinklers.

Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. The project file contains all information for the building design. families. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. or bottom of foundation. section views. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. for example. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. This information includes components used to design the model.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. elevation views. and ceilings. and drawings of the design. Project: In Revit MEP. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. from geometry to construction data. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Often. schedules. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. North . To place levels. and types. Most often. such as roofs. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. you can explicitly control them. top of wall. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. you must be in a section or elevation view. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. first floor. In other cases. If you can draw. programming is not required. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . By using a single project file. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. For example. views of the project. However. and so forth). Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. In Revit MEP. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. floors. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design.

identical use. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Type: Each family can have several types. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Unlike system and standard component families. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. and wires. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. For example. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. For example. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. With a few clicks. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. each in-place family contains only a single type. System families can be transferred between projects. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. A type can also be a style. System families include ducts. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. or layer the views to see only the one on top. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. hiding.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. You can also display several project views at one time. Then experiment with them. A type can be a specific size of a family. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. pipes. and similar graphical representation. showing. For example. However. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. such as a A0 title block.

Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To return the panel to the ribbon. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 .

. and for switching views. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. and CAD files. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. project and system parameters. and settings. tools used for editing existing elements. architect-specific tools. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. When working on the Modify tab. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. select the tool first. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . data and systems. tools used for running analysis on the current design. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. then select what you want to modify. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images.

A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. provides access to common tools. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. By default. provides requested information. closes the application menu (double-click). To keep a panel expanded. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. For example. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click).Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. when adding duct. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. displays frequently used tools. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 .

(New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Open) save the current drawing.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. such as Export and Publish.. (Export) On the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. select a file to open. click. (Save As) export the current drawing... NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing.

enters selection mode and ends the current operation. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. or template file. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . publish the current project. annotation. to.. (Print) access product and license information. (Publish) print the current drawing. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. annotation.On the application menu. and Walkthrough. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. but is not enabled by default. or template file.. (Licensing) close the file. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.. To enable or disable a tool item. click. saves a current project.. Camera. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. provides views including Default 3D. family. family.

Clear the Status Bar check mark. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create.To undo or redo a series of operations. Group. Starting with the most recent command. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. repeat the command. Modify. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). check the Status Bar. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. To show the Status Bar again. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. To hide the Status Bar. Clipboard. This displays the command history in a list. In addition. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. When you are highlighting an element or component. However. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. When you are using a command. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. or the Family Editor. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. displaying the same information. workshared components. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. when you switch to another editing mode. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame.

It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. for example.To cancel or exit the current command. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. click (Modify). On the Quick Access toolbar. select one or more elements of the same category. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. To change existing elements to a different type. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Place a Wall. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. When you place an element in a drawing. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 .

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. 1 Click ➤ Open.rvt.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. For example. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Zoom the view In the tutorials. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. There are several ways to access zoom options. After you are familiar with these tasks. click Training Files. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . In the following steps.

this is referred to as a crossing selection. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. NOTE As you zoom in and out. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. To modify or add snap increments. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. When you release the mouse button. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. Modifying the View | 19 . use a zoom menu command to zoom out. click . 9 To display SteeringWheels. 6 Click in the drawing area. In the drawing area. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. If you do not have a wheel mouse. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). the view zooms in on the selected area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. on the Navigation bar. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region.

You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. press ESC. click the SteeringWheels tab. Click and drag to orbit the design. and then using the Zoom tool again. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 14 To exit the wheel. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. To define settings for SteeringWheels. As you move the mouse. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. For more information about SteeringWheels. moving the wheel to the desired location. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . ➤ Options. and click tin the Options dialog. 11 Click and hold the mouse button.

bottoms. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. After you are familiar with these tasks. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. referred to as shape handles. Similar controls. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Small blue dots. These are the drag controls. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 2 Enter ZR.HVAC Plan . Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.Design. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Level 2 . 3 Click and drag the bottom control.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . display along the ends. as shown. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. and select the duct. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. called drag controls. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.

or press CTRL+Z.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click the Undo command. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Move. select the first item in the list. In this example. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. All changes you make to a project are tracked. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. on the Standard toolbar. 6 On the Undo menu.

and click again to specify the ending position. such as Move and Copy. require 2 clicks to complete the command. The duct is moved to the new position. After selecting the element to move. 11 With the duct already selected.Some commands. as shown. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . for example. and drag it to the left as shown. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 10 Move the cursor to the right. In this case. click to specify the starting position. you want to move the duct.

under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .End a command Some commands. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 14 Enter VG. 13 To end a command. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. such as the Modify Ducts command.Supply. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Select Mechanical . click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Press ESC twice.Return. Click OK. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. For example.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. 2 In the New Project dialog. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. such as the default project units and settings.rte template. such as coordination review and interference checking. You can either select a template from the template library. You can choose from several templates. under Template file. click Browse. create and manage views. and open North. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. and loadable families. and open Metric ➤ Templates. select Project. 6 Click OK. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. 27 . and click Open. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. settings. Finally. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. In that case. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. the default building levels and standard views. system families. 5 In the New Project dialog. use copy/monitor. under Create new.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. link files. and modify system settings. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. you learn how to start a project from a template. such as ducts and pipes. and geometry from the starting template. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. 7 In the Project Browser. New projects inherit all the families. click Training files.

under Energy Analysis. (Browse). you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. For Location. select Project template. navigate to Metric Templates. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. click Edit. If you want to use a template other than the default. you can select it now. ■ ■ Under Create new.rte template and click Open. for Energy Data. review the construction materials listed. When you select the material. Click Cancel. 10 Using the same method. create another new project using the Construction template. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. In the Choose Template dialog. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. For example. select Level 1. select School or University. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . ■ ■ For Ground Plane. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Click OK twice. select Manchester. for City. ■ For Building Construction. NH. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. click (Browse). 9 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. click Browse.8 In the drawing area. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. Click OK. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project.

and 140.00 mm. select Views. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings.rfa and click Open.000 mm. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. and 310. for 90. and fire protection systems. plumbing. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. piping. under Duct Settings. click Sizes.00 mm. Holding CTRL. select Identity Data. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Creating an MEP Project | 29 .rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. power distribution systems. click Round. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 24 In the right pane. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 140. 290. and demand factors for electrical systems.00 mm. 23 In the left pane. click Rectangular. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 26 In the right pane. 27 Click OK. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. Click OK twice.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. wiring. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark.00 mm. 110.00 mm. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.00 mm. 25 In the left pane.00 mm. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. under Pipe Settings. click Wiring. under Duct Settings.00 mm. 22 In the right pane. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 33 Click OK. for 90. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical.00 mm. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. For Categories. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 260. 110. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. After standard settings have been established for an organization. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. for 20.

select Project. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. families. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. Click Open. For Then by. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m.Origin to Origin. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 4 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click OK. You need to create the MEP model for the project. under Template file. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. click Browse. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Training. For Then by. To enable this coordination. sheets. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. and groups that are contained in a project. select Associated Level. 38 Close the file. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. under Create new. From the Positioning list. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. select Family and Type. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. For Sort by. select Auto . select Type/Discipline and click Edit. select View Name.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views.rvt. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. In addition. select Sub-Discipline. Linking Projects In this exercise. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects.

12 Click OK.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. select Room Bounding. 8 If necessary. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. under Constraints. Linking Projects | 31 . select the linked architectural model.Mech. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model.

verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model.Floor. click Plan View types. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click the level line for 03. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 On the left side of the view.

then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. Linking Projects | 33 . and click to select the linked model. If you modify a monitored element. appears above the copied elements. highlight the linked model. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. and that the copied elements are monitored. After copying. a warning message displays. indicating that an element has changed. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. and the level 4. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. for the link file. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click By Host View. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. warnings notify you of any violations. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. click Custom. level 3. indicating that a relationship is established. 34 On the Basics tab. 27 In the drawing area. select Custom. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. 29 In the drawing area.

of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 7 Click OK twice. Under Visibility. 3 In the View templates dialog. 36 Click OK. for Name. Site.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. Under Visibility. Planting. and Topography.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. Click OK. deselect Levels. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . enter Mechanical View and click OK. for the link file. Click OK. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . deselect Parking. Roads. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. 2 In the New View Template dialog. click Edit. Select Show categories from all disciplines. click Custom. under View Properties. select Custom.

8 Click ➤ Options. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 2 In the Options dialog. click Training Files. under Template file. click Browse. 3 Under Colors. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. under View Templates. and click OK. select Invert background color. Modifying System Settings | 35 . click the Graphics tab. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. 5 In the New Project dialog. select Mechanical and click OK. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. click the Graphics tab. journal cleanup options. selection default options. These settings control the graphics. 9 In the Options dialog. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. they are not saved to project files or template files. Notice that the drawing area is black. notification preferences. and your username when using worksharing.rte. 7 Click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP.

family template files. 17 Press ESC to end the command. click the File Locations tab. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 21 Close the file without saving it. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select yellow. 19 Press ESC to end the command. select One hour. For Tooltip assistance. including your default project template. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. and family libraries. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 18 Select the wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. select None. 11 In the Color dialog. 13 Under Notifications. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 2 In the Options dialog. 14 Click OK. the elements causing the error display using this color.10 Under Colors. When an error occurs. and click OK. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. click the value for Selection color. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. 12 Click the General tab. However. you specify default file locations.

there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. However. 8 Click Cancel. and Import dialogs. you can start a new project with that template. under Default path for family template files. such as in a large. and click Open. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. ➤ New ➤ Project. In the following illustration. Load. 10 In the Places dialog. click Browse. Specifying File Locations | 37 . Click and click Browse to select a template. centralized. TIP To view a template. note the list of library names. When you are opening. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. or loading a Revit MEP file. Save. saving. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. and you can create new libraries. 7 In the Options dialog. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 5 Under Default path for user files. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. click Places. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. select the folder to save your files to by default. This path is set automatically during the installation process. click Browse. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.3 Under Default template file. You can modify the existing library names and path. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. 4 Click Cancel. click Browse.

14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. or families. and click Open. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and Import dialogs. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. Load.11 In the Places dialog. click (Add Value). 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click the My Library icon. and click OK twice. and select it as the library path. Save. and change the name to My Library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. click My Library. 15 Under Library Name. and click (Browse). templates. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . ➤ Open.

Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click OK. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and decal image files. click Places. 19 Click Cancel. click Edit. 2 In the Options dialog. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 9 In the text editor. 27 Click OK. (Remove Value) to delete the library. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. specify the new location here. If you want to relocate this path. 3 Under Settings. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 21 On the File Locations tab. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click the Spelling tab. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 20 Click ➤ Options. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. select Ignore words in uppercase. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 23 Click 24 Click OK. click Edit. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 5 In the text editor. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 11 In the Options dialog. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 22 Select My Library. 14 Click in the drawing area. view the current path. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 12 Create a new project using the default template. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. custom color files. If you work in a large office. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. such as bump maps. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. This path is determined during installation.

or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. You can turn snap settings on and off. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 4 In the New Project dialog. 21 Under Personal dictionary. and enter 500 . Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click File menu ➤ Save. 18 Click ➤ Options. click Browse. under Template file. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. under Dimension Snaps. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click Close. you modify snap increments. work with snapping turned off. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click Training Files. click the Spelling tab.rte. As you zoom in and out within a view. In this exercise. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. 25 Close the file without saving it. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click OK. 24 In the Options dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 20 Under Settings. 23 In the text editor. 22 In the text editor. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis.17 In the Spelling dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click OK. click Restore Defaults. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 6 In the Snaps dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 19 In the Options dialog. you modify snap settings. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click Edit..

you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu.7 Under Object Snaps. click OK. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. This is the increment that you added previously. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and move the cursor to the right. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. snapping reverts to the system default settings. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . TIP To zoom while sketching. For example. zoom out until it does so. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 8 In the Snaps dialog. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. deselect Chain. If you do not have a wheel button. enter SM. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. While sketching. such as ZO to zoom out. If it does not. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. use the wheel button on your mouse. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries.

If you move the cursor along the wall. and the wall edges. 26 Close the file. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 19 Enter SM. and delete the value 500 . 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. and move the cursor to the right. 22 Move the cursor downward. the midpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and specify the wall endpoint. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Do not set the wall end point. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. with or without saving it. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint..Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. it will snap to the endpoints. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 25 Click OK. Notice that snapping is once again active.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you first configure the linked architectural model. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. This system consists of a cooling tower. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. water source heat pump (WSHP). The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After finishing each exercise. However. you can choose to save your work. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. methodology. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. you will understand the process. As you create the mechanical system. By following the recommended workflow. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you first plan the system. At the end of the tutorial. After applying a color scheme to the zones. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In this lesson. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this exercise. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.autodesk. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. go to http://www.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. 45 . and then you create a plenum level. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. If the tutorial training files are not present. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed.

6 In the Project Browser. NOTE When working with a linked file. Next.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 1 In the Project Browser. click to select it.rvt. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. and click OK. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. under Constraints. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. In this section. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and after the linked model highlights. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding.Space Plan is highlighted. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. you add a level for plenums. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . These components are defined in the architectural training file. select Room Bounding. not in the MEP training file. click Training Files. ceilings. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This makes the architectural components (such as walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. roof.MEP.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click West . 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. indicating that it’s the active view.

and in the Plan View Types dialog. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. The new level is placed. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. and click Properties. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. enter 2600mm. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 9 On the Draw panel. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. and enter Level 2 Plenum. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 16 Press Esc. right-click Level 2 Plenum. and click OK. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. For Offset. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. Click Plan View Types.

it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. Under Identity Data. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. In this exercise. for View Scale. NOTE After finishing each exercise. and click Apply Default View Template. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. you can choose to save your work.Plenum. 20 In the Project Browser. select Plenum Plan. select Design. verify that 1 : 100 is selected.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. for Level. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . and for Offset. For Sub-Discipline. However. select Level Above (Level 3). They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. Under Extents. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. enter 0. ■ Click OK twice. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. click Edit. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for View Range. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. right-click Level 2 Plenum. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. For Cut plane. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. In the next exercise. Under View Depth. In this exercise. For View Classification.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. for Default View Template. enter an Offset of 300mm. you place spaces in areas of the building model. for Top. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. select MEP . and then place spaces in various types of areas. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays.

and ceilings). For (Tag Location). select Level 2 Plenum. indicating that it’s the active view. For Offset. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m.rvt. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Horizontal. For Space. click Training Files. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. walls. select New. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. For Upper Limit. enter 0. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. Placing Spaces | 49 .Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.

The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Name. 14 In the drawing area.7 Click to place the space. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 219. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . ensuring coordination between the files. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 9 Select the space. for Number. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. enter Library.

19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. Placing Spaces | 51 . For Offset. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. and then click Modify. enter 0. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. 21 Using the method learned previously. select Level 3. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. For Upper Limit.

22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click OK. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. you place a space in a large corridor area. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. under Energy Analysis. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then split the space using a space separation line. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.

Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and then press Esc. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. enter 0. and for Offset. for Upper Limit. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar. select Level 3. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.

and change the space number to 216A.7 In the Project Browser. click in the name column. In the schedule. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 9 In the schedule. which was numbered 219Q. 10 Click in the number column. and select Corridor. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and scroll to the newly placed space.

as shown. 15 Press Esc twice. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 11 Close the schedule view. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator.

and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. you place a space in a chase. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.16 Using the method learned previously. 18 Close the file with or without saving it.

Space Plan is highlighted. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. indicating that it’s the active view. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. If necessary. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.

expand Spaces. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. select Level 3. click in the chase area to place the space. and then click OK. enter 0. and click Element Properties. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. right-click. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. On the Options Bar.4 Press Esc. 12 Click in the section view. select the space. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. for Upper Limit. 6 Enter VG. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. select Interior and Reference. For Offset. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Upper Limit. 10 In the plan view. In the plan view. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Roof Level. 8 Enter WT to tile the views.

17 Type ZF. enter Chase. floors.■ For Limit Offset. enter 225PC. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . and click OK. All spaces in the view are tagged. enter 1200. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. 15 Press Esc. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. ceilings. For Number. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. for Name. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and maximize the view. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. under Loaded Tags.Space Plan. Under Identity Data. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. Bounding elements (such as walls. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Spaces. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click Reference. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. it is automatically added to the Default zone. To display space reference lines. click View ➤ Zones. and verify that All Disciplines is selected.Zoning is highlighted. which removes the space from the Default zone. In this exercise. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . After a space is placed in an area. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model.20 Close the file with or without saving it. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. In the next exercises. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.rvt. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view.

you assign spaces to a zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. select Occupiable. and a new zone is created. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Next. and verify the zones in the System Browser.rvt. and click OK. double-click 121 Cafeteria. under Spaces. ) or 5 In the System Browser. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . As you do this. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The Zone tool is active. indicating that the space is occupiable.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. The new zone is listed in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. the Edit Zone tab displays. click Reference. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. To display space reference lines. under Energy Analysis. The graphic in the System Browser updates. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. you assign spaces to zones in the building. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.

and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). To view the zone in the drawing area. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). select HVAC Zones. and Electrical 220 spaces. 4 In the drawing area. and modify the zone properties.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Using the Edit Zone tab. you can add or remove a space from the zone. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Instruction. type VG. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Finish Editing Zone. select Computer Lab 222. Instruction 221. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Expand HVAC Zones. In the System Browser. you need to activate the zone visibility. Click OK. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 5 With the drawing area active. You work with a single zone until you click Finish.

and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. and verify the zone in the System Browser. enter 2 .Zoning. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 9 In the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.TIP After you finish editing the zone.Zoning view to activate it. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs).Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. click Training Files. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 5 Click in the Level 1 . for Name. and click OK. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.rvt. click Finish Editing Zone.West .Zoning is highlighted. under Spaces. You activated zone visibility in the views. expand 2 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 11 Close the System Browser. In this exercise. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . To display space reference lines.Area B. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. under Identity Data. click Reference. 10 On the Edit Zone tab.West . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Select Attached End. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Zoning floor plan.Zoning view. zoom out. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 15 Press Esc. Verify that the distance is 12mm. 8 In the Level 1 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning view. click in the Level 2 . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.

In this exercise. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries.Zoning view. Front. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). double-click the zone tag. click Training Files. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. click the corner where the Top. on the ViewCube. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. space.Zoning to make it the active view.East. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . 19 Close the file with or without saving it. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that Wireframe is selected. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. and click OK. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. double-click Level 1 . 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. and zone information. enter Lounge . for Name Value. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. and select 109 Lounge. you verify the building. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes.

select 1_South_Area C. Using the Highlight tool. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. With 109 Lounge selected. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. you isolate the space. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. ■ Click (Highlight). 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Next. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. ■ ■ On the Details tab.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. click (Isolate).

click . click . This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. Next. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. and humidification set point. and in the Space Type Settings dialog.22 °C : N/A is specified. Next.11 °C : 32. and then click OK. For Heating Information. For People. the space information displays for the selected space. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. the zone information displays for the selected zone. For Cooling Information. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. verify that 23. heating air temperature. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. For Construction Type. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. scroll down in the left pane. This indicates the outdoor air per person. and in the People dialog. outdoor air per area. and click OK. cooling air temperature. This indicates the heating set point. For Electrical Loads. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. Below the list of spaces and zones.22 °C : N/A is specified. click . and air changes per hour. verify that <Building> is selected. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. and then click OK. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. click (Shading). ■ ■ ■ Next. Below the list of spaces and zones. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and dehumidification set point.33 °C : 12. verify that <Building> is selected. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . This indicates the cooling set point. select Lounge/Recreation. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. select 109 Lounge. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. verify that 21.

floors.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. open MEP . and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. enter 0. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Level 3. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. roofs.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. 12 Using the methods learned previously. For Offset. click Cancel. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. 15 In the Project Browser. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and other room-bounding components. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space.

and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. select Plenum. you verified building. For Name. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and verify that the space has replaced the void. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this exercise. select Plenum. Click OK. and zone information. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. Under Energy Analysis. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). enter 212P. for Number. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. and select space Plenum 212P. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. Under Energy Analysis.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. space. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. Because this is an unoccupied space.

this option adjusts the times automatically. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. select School or University. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. verify that Manchester. for City. For Ground Plane.Space Plan. For Export Complexity. verify that Level 1 is selected.rvt. click Training Files. In order to select a space. select space Library 219. for Building Service. Click OK twice. verify that <Building> is specified. you need to select this option. For Postal Code. On the Weather tab. click Edit. under Energy Analysis. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. for Energy Data. enter 03101. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. For Project Phase. On the Place tab. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. NH. For Location. verify that 300 is specified. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). For Building Construction. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. and click Element Properties. right-click. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. If. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. click in the Value field. For Sliver Space Tolerance. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Volume Computations. double-click Level 2 . and click OK. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. is selected. 8 In the drawing area. verify that New Construction is selected.

■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. For Building Construction. You have verified the building information. verify that <Building> is specified. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that Occupiable is selected. for Values. and click OK. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). Under Heat Gain (per Person). If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Select Area per person. For People. click Edit. For Latent. m. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. select Heated and cooled. select Specified. and enter 15 sq. for Values. a cooling load. Select the space associated with the warning. 12 Click the Details tab. Under Power. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. and click to learn the cause for the warning. is specified. select Specified. click in the Value column. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy.Audio Visual. For Space Type. and then click . verify that Manchester. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. For Condition Type. verify that School or University is selected. Click OK twice. enter 45 W. enter 60 W. For Location. Click OK. for Values. For Sensible. select Actual. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . both. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. NH. click Edit. or neither. Next. select Library . For Building Service. select Actual. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. for Values.

click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . and under Heating Information. select 219 Library. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. click Calculate. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 16 After you review the loads report.11°C. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 19 In the drawing area. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. and click OK. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. and a loads report displays. 15 Review the loads report for project. 17 In the loads report. select 219 Library. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . or make any changes to the model. space. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. or zone information.Space Plan. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. click Information). and zone information for the building model. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. and can be modified here. weather. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. You should correct the space error in the building model. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. space. There should be no warnings displayed. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. under Energy Analysis. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. 21 Click OK. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. In this exercise.

rvt. Click OK. in relatively small increments. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. click Training Files. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. select HVAC Zones. click to the right of the building to place the legend. indicating that it’s the active view. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Zoom in to the legend. For Color Scheme.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 3 In the drawing area. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 .

select the color scheme legend.Expanded Ranges. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. The new scheme displays in the view. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. select Cooling Load . and click OK. under Schemes.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 11 Using the method learned previously. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. In this exercise. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise.rvt.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.

Under Available fields. In the Schedule Properties dialog. Select Schedule building components. In the Fields dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. For Discipline. select Spaces. For Type. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. and click OK. In the Calculated Value dialog. Click OK. For Formula. ■ Click Calculated Value. For Name. For Phase. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. click (Browse).Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. enter . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. more category options are available.Space Fill is the active view. select New Construction. for Formula. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select Spaces. enter Space Airflow Schedule. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. for Select available fields from.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. Select Formula. select Air Flow. enter Airflow Delta. select Calculated Supply Airflow. select HVAC. and then click . 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. Select Ascending. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. For Fields.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. ■ The schedule displays. select Level. select Level. and click OK. click the color swatch. For Background Color. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . verify that Show is highlighted. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. For Then by. select Airflow Delta. and Blank line. and then click Conditional Format. select Number. right-click to access schedule properties. In the Color dialog. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. For Value. Header. a view opens that contains the selected space. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. select red. select Not Between. Click OK twice. and then select Hidden field. Under Conditions to Use.

the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. In the next lesson. In this exercise. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. In later exercises.

you size ductwork and validate your air system design. After completing the air systems lesson. Then. you will create supply air systems. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. In this lesson. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you modify air terminal parameters. and work with the airflow schedule. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. After system creation. 79 . As you place the air terminals. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan.

Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 3 In the ceiling view. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . the space crossing lines display. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and scroll to space 223. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.

and then press Esc to end the command. Also. The schedule updates with the new flow data. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. and press Enter. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . and press Enter.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 9 On the Placement panel. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. enter 215 L/s. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. as shown. which in this case is the ceiling grid. type 3600. the hosted elements are updated as well.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and select M_Supply Diffuser . for Flow. click Place on Face. If the host element is modified or moved. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 17 Move the cursor down. 15 On the Options Bar. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. verify that Constrain is cleared. 13 On the Options Bar. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. select the diffuser.

25 In the drawing area. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click Open. Next. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. as shown. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. click Yes. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 24 In the Open dialog. and then press Esc. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. clear Leader.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. select one of the diffusers. select each of the 5 supply diffusers.rfa. click Place on Face. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. As you place the return diffusers. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 28 On the Placement tab. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 21 On the Options Bar. 22 In the drawing area.

open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . for Reference. under Other. and click to select the lines.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. click Yes. select Strong Reference. and click OK. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 32 In the Project Browser. as shown. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. Level. 31 In the alert dialog. select one of the return diffusers.

43 Using the same method. align the other return diffuser. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. and then press Esc twice. as shown. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. 40 In the drawing area. select the vertical grid line as shown. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid.

right-click. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. 47 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left.44 While pressing Ctrl. select both return diffusers. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. for Flow. enter 310 L/s. clear LeftArrow. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . and press Enter. and click OK. and click Element Properties. under Mechanical. As you place the air terminals. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. at the lower left corner of the building. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 8 In the Type Selector.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand HVAC . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 On the View Control Bar. select M_Supply Diffuser . and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. click Training Files. the space crossing lines display.Design to make it the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. and double-click Level 1 .HVAC Plan . and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.200 Neck. for Scale.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 9 On the Options Bar.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. click 1 : 100.rvt. 10 In the drawing area. When you highlight a space using the cursor.

15 Press Esc. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. Click OK. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. move the cursor down. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files.Airflow. for Flow. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Under Mechanical . under Constraints. As a result. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. By copying the diffuser. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. type 6000. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. enter 2400. and then press Enter. for Offset. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . 11 Select the diffuser. Also. enter 170 L/s. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser.

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.16 Using the same method. clear Leader. 18 On the Options Bar. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. and then press Esc. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers.

Type. select Air Terminals. for Sort by. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 .Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. for Flow. type. mark. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. For Category. select 21. Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. enter 210 L/s. 26 Using the method learned previously. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. and click View Properties. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 29 Using the same method. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Edit. under Other. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and then right-click in the schedule. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). and press Enter. for Embedded Schedule. it is a negative value. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. tile the windows. 27 In the schedule. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. under Available Fields. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. select Mark. double-click System Type. and Flow. Next. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. under space 115.

The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. As you highlight the zone. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. 31 In the drawing area. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule.Design. and maximize Level 1 . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. as shown.HVAC Plan .

3 times the heating load). select M_WSHP . and under Energy Analysis. 35 In the Type Selector. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 33 Click OK.High Efficiency . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.7-18 kW .Horizontal .97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. 36 In the drawing area. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.43 W (approximately 1.

41 In the Instance Properties dialog. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. After creating the logical connection. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. 6 Keep the System Browser open. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. click Training Files.rvt. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. including energy analysis. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. enter . and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. right-click the title. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You then create the logical connection between the system components. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. the space crossing lines display. 44 Zoom in to space 115. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. When you highlight a space. As you add diffusers to systems. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click View ➤ Systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. However. In this exercise. and click OK. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . for Constraints ➤ Offset. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder.

These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. System Name. 18 Click OK. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 17 Using the method learned previously. 15 Click Cancel. the number of elements is updated. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 12 In the System Browser. review the Number of Elements. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 11 In the drawing area. and the system connects them. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . and Flow value. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Connect Into. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. the air terminals are the children. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. On the Options Bar. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223.

rvt. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . which updates the name in the System Browser. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 25 Click OK. for System Name. In this exercise. In this exercise. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. under Identity Data. for Mark. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. under Mechanical. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 26 Click Finish Editing System.Rename the system Next. 22 Click OK. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. and display solution 1. For Flex Duct Type. click Settings. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Round.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. for Solution Type. When you highlight a space using the cursor. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. the Network type provides several solutions. 4 In the drawing area. A Generate Layout tab displays. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. In this case. Select Branch.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Duct Type. enter 3000. Also. select Network. the space crossing lines display. For Duct Type. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. 7 On the Options Bar. select the upper left diffuser. enter 3000. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. For Offset. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. which provides various layout tools. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. 5 On the Options Bar. For Offset.

click Modify. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. select a different layout solution. as is the elbow itself. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. or manually modify the duct. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. as shown. or offset elevations are incorrect. 11 Click Finish Layout. enter 900. you’ll get an error in a later step. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . For example. Either relocate the system components. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. Click OK. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added.

You can delete ductwork and the system remains. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. a disconnection exists. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. If the entire network does not highlight. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . fittings. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection.Flow. The first time you press Tab. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and equipment. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. for Color Scheme. Using a flow-based color scheme. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and click to select it. and click OK. highlight a segment of the main duct. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. thus it is not part of the system. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Usually. select Duct Color Fill .

for Values Displayed. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). and then click OK. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. 20 In the drawing area. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the WSHP. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical . and press Enter. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select By View.Airflow. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and on the Options Bar. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. for Flow. but not all values are used in this view. and click OK. under Graphics. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. select one of the diffusers in the system.

29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.65 Pa/m. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Select Restrict Height. for Schemes. Select the upper segment of main duct. select Duct Color Fill . select Calculated Size Only. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. highlight a segment of the duct. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . Select Only. Under Constraints. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. and select 400. and then click to select it. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Click OK.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. for Branch Sizing. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. click Cancel. and enter . and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. select Friction. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 26 Click OK.Velocity. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. select the color scheme legend. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and drag it to the right.

and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.The ductwork and fittings are updated. and pressure loss. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Use the information that displays (flow. Using this tool. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. static pressure. pressure.

you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. also known as the critical path. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.NOTE As you inspect a system. click Training Files. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 35 Click Finish.rvt.

6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.HVAC Plan . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and click Draw Duct. indicating that it’s the active view. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. and select the WSHP. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.

for Offset. Front.3D MEP. NOTE When drawing duct. double-click MEP . click the corner where the Top. 11 On the Options Bar. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 15 On the ViewCube. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. enter 3000. right-click the connector grip. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 In the Project Browser. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. select the top right diffuser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. and click Draw Duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown.8 Press Esc twice to end the command.

20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. in space 115. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 19 In the drawing area. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. it is considered a closed loop. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. The ductwork is automatically created.

connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. and select the top left diffuser. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . You can ignore the warning. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog.22 Using the same method.

you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 30 Press Esc twice. and then click Modify. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split.

This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. and click to select it. clear Restrict Height. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. select a segment of the main duct. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. under Constraints. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. such as a plenum. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. 40 Using the same method. under Mechanical . and then click OK. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.Airflow. for Flow. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

108 .

Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you place mechanical equipment. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. including 2 base mounted pumps. 109 . In this lesson.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Create return and supply piping systems. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Then. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. and a cooling tower located on the roof. on level 3 of the building model. additional water source heat pumps from level 1.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.HVAC Plan . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.7-18kW . indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. as shown. and select M_WSHP . in corridor 328. click Training Files.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Horizontal High Efficiency .Left Return . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.

9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 Select the WSHP. click the dimension. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 7 On the Options Bar. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. as shown. and enter 600. click the top edge of the WSHP. 8 Click the corridor wall face. and click to place the dimension. verify that Wall faces is selected.

select the 2 WSHPs. and in the Type Selector. as shown.) 14 Click Modify. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.11 Press Enter and then press Esc.

19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and click to place it in the mechanical room. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. as shown. enter 2750. for Offset. Click OK. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Click Modify. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 .16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 0. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Water Flow. Under Mechanical.75 L/s. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Create the logical connection between the system components.22 Close the file with or without saving it. Unlike logical connections (systems). you create the return and supply piping systems. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. analyses cannot be performed. including flow and pressure. You can create pipes to connect system components. but without a corresponding system.

Assigning a system component to an existing system. select the 2 WSHPs. Creating a Piping System | 115 . In the System Browser. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. This display indicates that the system is selected.Mech 330). A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. where it is easier to review the information. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. 5 In the System Browser. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen.Design is highlighted. while pressing Ctrl. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click the Systems column heading. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. and click View ➤ Piping. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.HVAC Plan . and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Therefore. click Training Files. As you assign equipment to systems. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area.

Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. Notice that on the Options Bar.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. for System Name. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and the Edit System tool is not active. select the boiler. 17 On the Options Bar. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click Finish Editing System. You have created the hydronic return system. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. for System Name. 10 On the Options Bar. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. In cooling mode. 25 Select the boiler. under Design ➤ HVAC . double-click Roof . 22 In the Select Connector dialog. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements.Design. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. In heating mode. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.HVAC Plan . 26 Click Finish Editing System. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. and select the cooling tower. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 23 Close the roof plan view. 19 In the Project Browser.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Creating a Piping System | 117 . You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. and click OK. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. and bypasses the cooling tower.

The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 28 Using the same method. and click Expand All. including the flow rate and size of the component. You also manually modify the layout path as required. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser.8. expand the Hydronic Return system category. enter 0. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and click Column Settings. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Water Flow. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 29 Right-click CHWS. expand Piping. In the System Browser. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 32 In the System Browser. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. under Mechanical. and click Select. and click Properties. and click OK. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. you can view several parameters. indicating the logical connection.

Mech 330). IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. A system preview displays in red. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. When you draw a box to select components. and click OK. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. press Tab to highlight the system. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner.rvt. select Mechanical Equipment. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). the boiler. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you can place the cursor over a system component. then the Select a System dialog displays. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. click Check None.Design is highlighted. 5 In the Filter dialog. click Training Files. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system.HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC plan view range are highlighted. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and click to select it. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 .

This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. structural beams. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. duct. select Perimeter. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. click Settings.9 In the Select a System dialog. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. verify that Solutions is selected. enter 450. It does not reference the architecture. 11 On the Options Bar. or architectural components. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. 10 Click OK. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . For Inset. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 13 Click Cancel. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select CHWR. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created.

The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. and press Tab 3 times. With each Tab. 17 Optionally. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . to display the path with thinner lines. 18 Place the cursor over the piping.75 L/s. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. the flow for each WSHP is 0. 19 In the drawing area.16 Click Finish Layout. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.

20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.50 L/s. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. notice that the Water Flow is 1.75 L/s). 23 Under Mechanical. and click OK. 24 Press Esc. 22 Select the boiler. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler.50 L/s. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the value for Flow is 1. and click OK. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. under Mechanical. and access its instance properties.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs.

Design. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. Logically. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 27 On the System Tools panel. 28 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 .HVAC Plan . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. On the Options Bar. click Edit System. the Number of Elements is now 8. 32 Click Finish Editing System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

44 L/s.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly.94 L/s. note that the value for Flow is 4. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. access its instance properties. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected.94 L/s. Next. you physically close the CHWR loop. 35 Using the drag control.50 L/s. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. and click Cancel. 38 Using the same method. which propagates flow throughout the system. so the total flow of 6. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . under Mechanical.

In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Inset. enter 450. enter 0. select a WSHP. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area.00%. 40 In the Select a System dialog. 41 Click OK. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. select CHWS. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. and then click OK. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). select Perimeter 1 of 5. For Slope. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . Click Settings.

48 While pressing Ctrl. (Both sections are at the same elevation. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. In a later exercise. 47 In the drawing area. 46 Click Modify. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. as shown.

To create the piping system. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. select a different layout solution. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. 50 Using the same method. Either relocate the system components. as shown. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. or offset elevations are incorrect. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . 51 Click Finish Layout. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). or manually modify the pipe.

Design is highlighted. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. click Training Files. As you work in the training file. double-click 3D Building. indicating that it’s the active view. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. and the return pipes are magenta. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop.rvt.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. as shown. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop.

7 In the plan view.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. as shown. select the section of piping.

■ Click to move the piping. and press Esc to clear the selection. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 9 In the 3D view. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. Click to specify the reference point. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. select the boiler. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system.

flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 12 In the 3D view. select the boiler. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and click OK. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 13 In the plan view. and the lower one is secondary. select the return pipe riser. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 .11 In the Select Connector dialog. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. and click Draw Pipe. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. The connections are automatically created.

enter 600. ■ Move the cursor down.In a plan view. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 381. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. for Offset. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and you select 1 connector. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. and press Enter. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right.

19 In the plan view. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. and the appropriate fittings are created. As you place piping runs that are close together. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 18 Press Esc twice. and click OK. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 21 In the Select Connector dialog.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. select the primary base mounted pump.

134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click the minus symbol. you select the tee fitting. and click Draw Pipe. and select it.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. right-click the bottom connector. and click to draw the pipe. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. as shown. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and when the connector point displays. click to connect to the pump.27 Move the cursor to the right.

136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view.28 Press Esc. for Offset. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. select the primary base mounted pump. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. and click Draw Pipe. 29 If necessary. and click to create the pipe. enter 1200. right-click the discharge connector. 31 On the Options Bar.

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .33 Press Esc.

upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. as shown. right-click the bottom control on the tee. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 35 Using the method learned previously.

■ ■ On the Options Bar. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and click to create the pipe. type 300. enter 2850. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . and press Enter. for Offset.■ Move the cursor down.

Next. You now have a closed loop system. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify.

The flow is being propagated through the piping. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. and click Element Properties. for Cooling Water Flow.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. 43 Press Esc. view the properties for the secondary pump. 44 In the 3D view.50 or 50% of the Flow. When you create the pumps in parallel. which is rounded up to 3. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click Cancel. the value is 0 L/s.44 L/s. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . and click Element Properties. as shown. 48 In the plan view. 42 Click OK. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 46 Press Esc. notice that under Mechanical.44 L/s). you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. right-click. under Mechanical. select the cooling tower. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. notice that Flow is 6. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . and click OK. 41 Using the same method. right-click. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. under Mechanical. Connect the cooling tower Next.

■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

49 Press Esc. select the cooling tower.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. and close the dialog. 50 In the 3D View. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 .44 L/s. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.

HVAC Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.52 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.Design is highlighted. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). as shown. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m.rvt. and is heated by the boiler. When the valve is open.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Adding Valves In this exercise. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. the water bypasses the cooling tower. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view.

5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. The bypass valve is closed by default.4 On the Options Bar. 8 Press Esc twice. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. Adding Valves | 145 . 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. and select M_Ball Valve . 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.

10 Press Esc. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. place another M_Ball Valve . 14 Using the same method. 12 Select M_Ball Valve . 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . parallel to the previously placed valve.

verify that Flow is 0 L/s. under Mechanical. 19 Using the same method.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. right-click.44 L/s. and click OK. and click Element Properties. validate that the Flow is 6. Adding Valves | 147 . For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower).

Initially. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). (This valve allows the water to flow through it. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. and select M_Ball Valve .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In heating mode. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Using the method you just learned. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 20 Select the bypass valve. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. and select M_Ball Valve . validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s.44 L/s. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s.44 L/s.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. validate that the Flow is 6. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. for Schemes. and click OK. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Design is highlighted. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.Flow. as shown. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK. click Pipe Color Fill . indicating that it’s the active view.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.Size.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC Plan . Sizing Pipe | 149 . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. select Pipe Color Fill . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values.

for Branch Sizing. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Click OK. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. select Friction. select a different layout solution. and click to select the branch.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. or manually modify the pipe. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.5 m/s. 13 Press Esc. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Select And. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Under Constraints. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and for Velocity. Either relocate the system components. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. enter 1. and enter 220 Pa/m. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. or offset elevations are incorrect.

Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. pressure.Design ➤ 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and double-click 3D Building. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Inspecting the System | 151 . The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. Inspecting the System In this exercise. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.14 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m.rvt. Using the System Inspector. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.

flow. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . An inspection flag reports the section number. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. and pressure information including pressure loss. as required. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). This information helps you modify the system design. as shown.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. Warnings display. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834.rvt. for Fluid Temperature.Design. and to size pipe. select 32° C. you need to validate them.Note that the Flow is 1. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the Static Pressure is 41916. 10 Click Finish. In this exercise. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and double-click Level 3 . Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.4 Pa. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. targeting those systems that need attention. 9 Using the same method. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.0 L/s. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . inspect Section 6 again.HVAC Plan .7. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.1 Pa.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

and click Expand All. After you assign components to a system. otherwise. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. 4 In the System Browser. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Show to view all of the system components. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. In the System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and confirm unassigned system components. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. For example. right-click the Systems titlebar. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. double-click Level 1 . 6 In the Project Browser.Design floor plan. After you have assigned all components to systems. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. thus assigning the components to a system.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.Design. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. expand the Unassigned folder. right-click Hydronic Return. 12 In the System Browser.HVAC Plan . The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. and select Level 3 . the pipe is associated with that system. 10 Using the same methods. and for pipe sizing. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. and click View. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. 9 Right-click CHWS.HVAC Plan . You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. click Close. 7 In the System Browser. As you learned when placing components. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. If you place components without assigning them to a system. TIP If you have multiple views open.

14 Using the methods that you learned.13 Right-click CHWR. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. Checking Piping Systems | 155 .

156 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 157 .

158 .

Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Define required lighting.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

For Temperature. For Material. Select Correction Factor. select Copper. distribution systems. enter THHN. As you place components and create circuits. wiring.04.Wire Sizes. For Factor. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. select Copper. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select 90. enter 70. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . enter 1. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. In this exercise you review electrical settings. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. speeding up the design phase. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. expand Wiring . and demand factors that are applied in the design. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. You also add a wiring type. Click OK. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. select Wiring Types. ■ ■ For Material. click (Open). ■ Click New Correction Factor.

select 10000 VA. enter 120/240. For Neutral Multiplier. For Max Size. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. enter 220. For L-L Voltage. For Value. select Distribution Systems. For Phase. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter 240. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. select Voltage Definitions. For Insulation. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. select 3. For Neutral Size. For Maximum. Under More Than. select 240. enter 250. enter 2000. enter 50. Click OK. enter 240. select Single. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. select Steel. For Minimum. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. select Hot Conductor Size. select 120. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . By specifying a range. For Wires. Click Split. select Power. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. Select Neutral Required. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select THHN. For Conduit Type. select 75. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. enter 1. select Demand Factors. For L-G Voltage.0.

You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Group Parameter Under. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. restrooms. Verify that Instance is selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. For Discipline. 5 In the drawing area. and conference rooms.Lighting group in the space element properties. select Electrical . select Illuminance. Later in the tutorial. click Add. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. and double-click Level 2 . enter Required Lighting Level. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. click (Open). Under Categories. under the Electrical . For Type of Parameter. In this case the key style is the type of space and. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Spaces. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. Click OK twice. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.Lighting. select Electrical. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog.Lighting Plan. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. such as offices. click Training Files.rvt. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan.

select Spaces. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. Click OK. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. Click OK. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. under Available Fields. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. enter Open Office. and click OK. enter Space Lighting Requirements. under Electrical . double-click Required Lighting Level. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. enter 485. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. Select Schedule Keys. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. and for Key Name. For Name. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. enter Lighting Levels.Lighting.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. 22 Using the same method. click Edit. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. which is mapped to project units. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 21 Click OK twice. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. Notice that as you enter the data.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . for Sorting/Grouping. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. change the sort order back to the default setting. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name.Lighting Plan. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. select Required Lighting Level.

You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. under Identity Data. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. click (Open). you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. Later in this exercise. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. 27 Click OK.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. for Lighting Levels. select Instruction-Standard. that Required Lighting Level is blank. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. the value input applies only to the selected space. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design.

■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. click Training Files. Select the scheme for 450. and in the At Least column. Select the scheme for 500 lx. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. enter Required Lighting Levels. for Title.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click (Add Value) five times. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. enter 200. enter 800. click (Add Value) again. for Category. and press ENTER. select Spaces. Select the scheme for At Least 20.rvt. and press Enter. and click (Add Value).00 lx. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. ■ Click OK. verify the By Range is selected. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. enter Required Lighting and click OK. and press ENTER. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. For example. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. for Name. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. Under Schemes.00. then the new value will be 400 lx. click (Duplicate).00.00 lx. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown.00 lx. 00 lx still selected. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. enter 900. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. For Color. select Required Lighting Level.

enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline. and double-click Level 2 . Name. double-click Number. select Required Lighting. select Spaces. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. Average Estimated Illumination. Level. Click OK. For Name.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Color Scheme. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. for Available Fields. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select Illuminance. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. 8 In the drawing area. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. For Type. and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . select Spaces. select Electrical.Lighting CF.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser.

select Required Lighting Level.■ For Formula. Click OK twice. select Lighting Delta. For Value. for Test. type a hyphen. for Custom Colors. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Click Conditional Format. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. under Condition. Click OK three times. Select Blank Line. and click Browse. click Browse. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click OK. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. select Not Between. Select Header. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. for Formula. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. Click Background Color. for Fields. select Red. On the Formatting tab. select Average Estimated Illumination. press the spacebar. for Sort by. select Level.

16 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red.

170 .

you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. as you place lighting fixtures. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Create power loads. Create a panel schedule.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Then. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. power circuits. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. 171 . First.

Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m.rvt. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 2 In the drawing area. click (Open). By using orange as the color for this range. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . click Training Files.Lighting CF view is open. You can create additional color schemes. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Orange. for Basic Colors. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. select the color legend. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 8 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. for the Spaces Category.Lighting Ceiling plan. select Average Estimated Illumination. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Click OK. In the Color dialog. Under Scheme Definition.

all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 13 Click the Level 2 .Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. zoom to space Library 219. which is the lowest value in the specified range. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.

277V. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.the +/. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 19 Press ESC to end the command. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically.5 fc range is satisfied. the fixtures will move accordingly. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.5 fc range. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . 18 Click to place the fixture. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

■ Under Electrical Loads.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. scroll to view space space Library 219. for Name enter and click OK. enter 162. In the Name dialog. for Apparent Load. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.00 VA. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

enter . specify 15000. Under Photometrics.93.00 lm. click Training Files. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 183 . In the Select File dialog. junction boxes. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. for Color Preset. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog.ies and click Open. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. click the value for Initial Intensity. enter . select Xenon and click OK. select T5 [HO]. select 463T5_S. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Ballast Loss Factor. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.85. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Placing Switches. Under Electrical. select Luminous Flux. click the value for Initial Color. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. 2 In the drawing area. Click OK. and click OK. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Under Photometrics. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. enter F15. ■ Under Photometrics. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Junction Boxes.rvt.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. click the value for Light Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. 9 In space Library 219. Under Photometrics. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. select the top center fixture. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. for Type Mark. ■ Click Apply. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. for Lamp. click (Open). 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. you add switches. ■ Click OK twice. Placing Switches. In the next exercise. and receptacles to your design.

Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 7 Click to place the switch. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.277V. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.

Select M_Junction Boxes . Placing Switches. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. and Receptacles | 185 . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.rfa and click Open. 12 In the Load Family dialog.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. Junction Boxes. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. The element type M_Junction Boxes . 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.

Offset. Click OK twice. 21 In the drawing area. note the Number of Poles is 1.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. for Level 2 . Click Edit Type. In the Type Properties dialog. enter JB-1NL. enter 2750. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Library 219. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 15 Select the junction box. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. Under Electrical.14 Press ESC to end the command. NOTE When entering values. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. for Mark. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.

Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 187 . Space Number. Junction Boxes. Expand Electrical. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. 23 In the System Browser.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. NOTE If necessary. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Space Name. Expand General. and Number of Elements. Click OK. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. 26 In the System Browser. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Select Size. Distribution System. 24 For any column. right-click and click Column Settings. and Voltage. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Select Load.

28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 31 Close the System Browser. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. Placing Switches. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. 38 Select the receptacle. Junction Boxes. select Copy and Multiple. move the cursor along the wall. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. and Receptacles | 189 . 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 40 On the Options Bar.

enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 43 Press ESC to end the command.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. and Receptacles | 191 .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.

Adding wiring to a project is optional. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . and work toward the higher voltage. click (Open). and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m.equipment.208V MCB . You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).Surface: 100A. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. zoom to the space Electrical 220. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). click Training Files. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area.

15 On the Options Bar.480V MCB . 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select 480/277 Wye. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Loads. For Panel Name.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. enter 20. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. for Max. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 14 Select the panelboard.Loads. for Distribution System. enter 20. #1 Pole Breakers. Click OK. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select 120/208 Wye. for Max. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. enter LP-2B. 9 On the Options Bar. enter PP-2B. for Distribution System. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 8 Select the panelboard. Click OK. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. For Panel Name.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 7 Press ESC to end the command. #1 Pole Breakers.

22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 20 In the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 23 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. which is the logical connection between the elements.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Instruction 221. and for Category.

25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 28 Press ESC to end the command. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way.

33 Select the switch on the right.31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 32 Press ESC. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 38 Press ESC to end the command.35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.

click Check None. 2 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.39 Using the same method. click (Open).rvt. click Training Files. enter 2. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. except without wire. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Loads. Click OK. Next you create circuits without showing wire. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and create permanent wiring. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . select Wires. for Hot Conductors. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Click OK. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 42 In the Filter dialog. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. and for Category. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.

Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. right-click on the Systems heading. and verify that Load. 13 In the System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected. expand Power. Distribution System. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. Expand Electrical. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. ■ 16 In the System Browser. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Click OK. Voltage. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. and then expand circuit 1. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Rating. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 .

The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Click OK. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. under Electrical. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 30 Close the System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 22 With the junction box still selected. change the Voltage to 277V. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click Tags.

for Type Mark. For Circuit Number. click below the first one to place it. Click OK. click Edit Type.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 35 Press ESC to end the command. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. select Break. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. under Identity Data. Click Yes. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. enter FR4. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 47 In the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 40 Click OK twice. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.

58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. click Check None. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 52 In the Save As dialog. select Lighting Fixture Tags. click (Open). 57 In the Filter dialog. and click Apply.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. for File Name. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. and for Category. Click OK. Click Save. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. enter a comma. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area.rfa. 54 Select all of the tags. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click OK. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. click Training Files.rvt. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Next you create a switch system. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.

7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. under Electrical Lighting. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. enter a. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 2 In the drawing area. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. for Switch ID. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. Click OK. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.

24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.Lighting. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. for switch ID. enter b. under Electrical . 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor.

10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. click (Open). 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire.Loads. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the drawing area. enter 2. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. and for Category. for Hot Conductors. lighting. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 4 In the Filter dialog. under Electrical . Click OK. and data systems. Circuits are used for power. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 7 In space Electrical 220. and click Element Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click Check None. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select Electrical Fixtures. select the PP-2B panel. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m.26 Close the file with or without saving it. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. Creating Power Loads | 207 . click Training Files. Click OK.rvt.

208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and in the drawing area. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and in the right pane. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks.13 Select the wire again. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. select Wiring. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. and click to select the circuit. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 19 Click OK. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. and click Open. 15 In the Load Family dialog.rfa. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.

Creating Power Loads | 209 . 28 In the drawing area. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. select the PP-2B panel. 29 In space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. click the connector of the first receptacle. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. in space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 26 Press Delete. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. as shown. as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 22 In space Electrical 220.

30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Next you balance the loads for your design. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring.

8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. Finally.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Click OK. Had there been a greater imbalance. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Scroll down. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. the distribution is shifted. After re-balancing loads. 1-#12. click Rebalance Loads. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. click Open. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 1-#10. for Rating. enter 30A.rvt. Under Electrical-Loads. 1-#10. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. select panel LP-2B. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 In the Electrical space. 1-#12. 6 Click OK. zoom to space Electrical 220. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog.Loads. enter 25A. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. under Electrical . for Rating. and click OK. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 17 Close the warning dialog. and click Finish Editing Circuit. and click OK. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 15 Select panel PP-2B. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. select the transformer TP-2B. enter 40A. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Next you create a panel schedule. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.Loads. under Electrical . 14 Close the warning dialog. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 24 Click Select Panel. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. for Rating.

Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. select Berlin Sans FB. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Sheets (all). for Font. for Font Size. Under Header Text. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Under Body Text. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Under Header Text. select Bold and Italic. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. click Edit. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. under Other.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. enter 4 mm. 6 In the Project Browser. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. click (Open). 5 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. and open E601 . for Font Size. for Appearance. enter 5 mm. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Click OK. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 4 Close the report. 10 Click OK twice. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Select PP-2B. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. The Panel Schedule Report displays.Panel Schedules.rvt. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m.

notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212.rvt. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. click Training Files. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Expand Unassigned. press TAB once. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. select space Lounge 212. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. click (Open). each with a load of 180VA. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. In the System Browser. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C.

Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Checking Your Design | 215 . click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 15 In the dialog. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 17 In the drawing area. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. select MDP-1. 20 On the Options Bar. In the System Browser. zoom to space Electrical 214. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. for Panel. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 16 Close the details dialog. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. under Warnings.

216 .

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .

218 .

and verify that Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. type PVC . Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. In this lesson. and click OK. you create a PVC pipe type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.Vent.rvt. Adding a pipe size. 2 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Sanitary. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open. planning is critical to a successful design. in addition to loading existing families.Plumbing Plan . In this exercise. 4 In the Name dialog. 219 . and click Properties. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. right-click PVC .

10 On the Selection panel. enter 46.5 In the Type Properties dialog.DWV.PVC . For Offset. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 17 In the left pane. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.006 mm. enter 45.000 mm. 18 For System Type. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings.Sch 40 . 26 Click OK. select None. click Training Files. select M_Tee Sanitary . 24 For Inside Diameter. 15 For System Type. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. click Modify.PVC . Cross. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes.DWV: Standard. under Mechanical. and click OK. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 6 Click OK. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. for Nominal. click Pipe Settings. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog.293 mm. 21 In the right pane. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 25 For Outside. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Plastic. enter 54. 13 In the right panel.PVC .Sch 40 . 27 For the new pipe size. PVC . select Tee.rfa. and open Metric\M_Trap P . In the Project Browser. select Sanitary. under Pipe Types. for Material. Tap. 22 Click New Size. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . enter -1250. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Tee.Vent is listed. and click Main. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV: Standard.Sch 40 . for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. enter 10°. select Branch. select Sanitary.

add a hot water heater. vent. Create the cold water system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create the hot water system. and hot and cold water piping. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. 221 . you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. sanitary piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. including plumbing fixtures. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. and click OK. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . select one of the components in the system. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. a toilet. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Sanitary 107. as shown.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. at the midpoint of the detail lines. A preview of the piping layout displays. 16 In the Select a System dialog. The base is placed. for example.

and click OK. 26 For Pipe Type. 29 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Options Bar.19 On the Options Bar. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. select 100 mm. 23 For Pipe Type. select PVC . 27 For Offset. enter -1225. enter 1. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Main. You accept this suggested solution. select Intersections. select Branch. for Diameter. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and modify it to meet project requirements. 21 On Options Bar. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. click Solutions. for Slope. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. and for Offset. 30 Click Modify. 25 In the left pane. select PVC . 24 For Offset. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. enter -350 mm. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Solution Type.Sanitary. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected.05%. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system.Sanitary. and click Settings. The default settings are automatically modified. enter -350 mm.

Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . use the ViewCube to orient the view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 34 Click Modify.33 In the 3D view.

37 On the Generate Layout panel.36 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout.

Overall. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the fitting and click to reorient it. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. When a fitting is reversed. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing .

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. as shown. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and check the slope control. adding sinks in the men’s room. you continue with the work from the last exercise.

236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select 560 mmx560 mm .rvt.Public. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. in the Type Selector.Design is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Rectangular.Design ➤ Floor Plans. as shown. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 4 On the Element panel. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. under M_Lavatory . 5 On the Placement panel. click Training Files.

Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. select Multiple. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 8 Select the sink. enter 711. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . and press Enter to create a second sink.2.7 Click Modify.

2. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 12 In the drawing area. Press Esc. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 11 In the System Browser. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. enter 711. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Add To System. 15 Click the 3 sinks. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. and press Enter to create the third sink.

and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the System Browser. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Select the tee. under Design ➤ Plumbing . notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 20 Select the fitting. double-click 3D Plumbing . as shown. 19 In the 3D view.Design ➤ 3D Views. click Finish Editing System. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 .16 On the Edit System panel.Overall.

for Slope. 24 On the Options Bar. enter 760 mm. with the tee fitting selected. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.05%. press Spacebar. for Offset.22 In the plan view. enter 1. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 27 Click Modify. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 26 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. and click Apply. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. When you press the Spacebar. and click to draw the pipe.

3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 32 Select the double wye fitting. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . 29 In the Type Selector. select Standard. and when the vertical center line displays. 30 In the 3D view.Sch 40 . move the cursor over the stub pipe.PVC . 31 Click Modify. click to place the fitting.DWV. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .

Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. zoom in to the double wye fitting. and press Enter.33 With the fitting selected. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 37 Select the fitting. for Offset. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and click Draw Pipe. on the Options Bar. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the next steps. right-click the right connector. double-click the section head to open the section view. enter 150 mm. 36 In the section view. enter 305 mm. 34 Press Esc. and press Enter.

43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). and click to place the pipe.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . as shown. 40 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 42 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method.

44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. enter 150 mm. and press Esc. 49 Using the same method. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 47 Move the cursor down. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. 46 In the section view. and click Draw Pipe. press Spacebar. 48 Click Modify. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. right-click the bottom connector.

Sch 40 . 52 In the plan view. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.PVC . 55 In the 3D view. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 51 In the Type Selector. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. select Standard. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 54 Click Modify. under M_Trap P . 53 Using the same method. 56 Using the same method. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . select the P-Trap on the left.DWV. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.

59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. and press Enter. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. and click Draw Pipe. enter 150 mm. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Click Modify. Move the cursor to the left.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Select the double wye pipe on the left. In the plan view. select the left P-Trap. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the right sink to the double wye. 58 Using the same method. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click in the plan view..

click Finish to select the recommended solution. select PVC Sanitary. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. On the Routing Solutions panel. under Pipe Types. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points.■ In the 3D view. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . In the Type Selector. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. as shown. select the section of pipe you just drew. Press Esc. while pressing Ctrl. and select a proposed solution.

63 On the Slope Editor panel. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. verify that 1. You have appropriately sloped the pipe.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. you continue with the work on the sanitary system.rvt. click Finish. for Slope. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 62 On the Options Bar. and verify the slope. adjusting the sanitary stack. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified.05% is selected. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 65 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files.

PVC . 7 On the Selection panel. and click the intersection to place the fitting. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Design. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Floor level line. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and click Draw Pipe. select the elbow fitting on the right. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 In the Section view. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Design. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Overall. select the vertical stack. and click to draw the pipe. 10 In the 3D view.DWV. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Sch 40 . right-click the top connector. click Modify.Plumbing Plan . select Standard. as shown. 9 In the Type Selector. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 5 Select the tee.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

43 In the 3D view. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 .

266 .

you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.autodesk. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. After finishing each exercise. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this lesson. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you can choose to save your work. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this tutorial. click Training Files. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. 2 Right-click Standard. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. If the tutorial training files are not present. You create a new pipe type.rvt. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. go to http://www. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. However.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. 267 .

This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. select Fire Protection Wet. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Next. for Material. For Offset. For System Type. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and then click OK.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. For Pipe Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. In the left pane. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. verify that 2800 is specified. In this exercise. However. select Main. click Rename. verify that 2800 is selected. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. structural beams. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. under Mechanical. For System Type. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. select Carbon Steel. duct. select Fire Protection Wet. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. For Pipe Type. In the next exercise. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. and click Properties. and enter Fire Protection Wet. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. you modify the type properties of the pipe. 9 Click OK. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. or architectural components. For Offset. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. you create project parameters and work with schedules. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches.

enter Zone 1. right-click. for Sprinkler Zone.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click OK. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . select Spaces. Under Categories. select the upper half of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select space Instruction 221 as shown. enter Sprinkler Zone. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. For Group parameter under. indicating that it’s the active view. the space crossing lines display. for Name. 8 Using a crossing window. 5 Click OK twice. click Add. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Fire Protection. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. select Fire Protection. 6 In the drawing area.Design is highlighted. and click Element Properties.Fire Protection Piping Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.

click Training Files. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. select Zone 1. for Sprinkler Zone. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Using the same method.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click OK. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Fire Protection. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. to which you add various parameters. and then click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection.rvt. including a calculated value parameter. under Fire Protection. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. verify that only Spaces are selected. you create schedules for sprinkler design. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. enter Zone 2. and then access instance properties. 10 In the Filter dialog.

Obstructed-Combustible. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . for Name.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. click the Formatting tab. For Group parameter under. For Unit symbol. enter Maximum Spacing. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Protection Area Construction Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Select Schedule keys. For Type of Parameter. For Rounding. For Key name. and click Field Format. For Name. select Millimeters. 11 Click OK twice.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Piping Plan . Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. double-click on each column separator. enter Light. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. Click OK. select Fire Protection. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . 14 Select the new header. The schedule displays. click Add Parameter. select Spaces. select mm. Click OK. 10 In the Format dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 6 Using the same method. select Length. indicating that it’s the active view. 9 On the Formatting tab. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. and on the ribbon. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select 0 decimal places. For Units. select Maximum Spacing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 7 Click OK.

Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Click OK. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Unobstructed Extra.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and press Enter. 16 Using the same method. enter 40. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. enter 4575. select Spaces. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Unobstructed Ordinary. For Name. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. enter Sprinkler Schedule. In the Maximum Coverage Area column.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . 22 Click OK twice. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. 19 Click the Formatting tab. Click OK. 20 On the Formatting tab. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Units. enter Minimum Sprinklers. select Minimum Sprinklers. under Available fields. select Area. select Common. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. For Formula. select Fixed. Enter the formula operator / after Area. and click OK. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select 0 decimal place. click . For Rounding. In the Fields dialog. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). and click Field Format. select Number. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. For Type. For Discipline.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab.

274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Then by (second instance). Select Header and Blank line. select Grand totals. select Minimum Sprinklers. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Level. click Edit. 26 Click OK 3 times. for Sort by. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. and then select Hidden field. select Hidden field.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. and then click Field Format. At the bottom of the dialog. For Fields. Select Header and Blank line. For Then by. verify that Use default settings is selected. select Number. select Sprinkler Zone. and click View Properties. Under Field formatting. for Sorting/Grouping. ■ In the Format dialog. select Sprinkler Zone. under Other. For Fields. and select Totals only. select Level.

and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and click View Properties.27 In the drawing area. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. delete the word Maximum. and Count. for Filter by. double-click Type. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. select Grand totals. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Field formatting. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. select Count. for Fields. select Sprinklers. click Edit. On the Formatting tab. and select Totals only. and click View Properties. for Embedded Schedule. for Filter. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. select Level equals Level 2. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 30 Click OK twice. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. select Embedded Schedule. click Edit. For Category. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . right-click the schedule. select Calculate totals. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. System Name. for Available fields. under Other.

select Ordinary. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 43 Click Cancel. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. for Protection Area Construction Type. 48 In the floor plan. double-click FP . you are actually editing information in a database of building information. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. and access the instance properties. 52 Click OK. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 41 In the plan view. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . but their values are not determined. 50 Access the instance properties. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The parameter change is evident in the schedule.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 44 In the schedule. select Light. under Identity Data. and the spacing parameter values are evident.Fire Protection Plan Design. select Ordinary. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. As a result.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 With the space still selected. select space 221 Instruction. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. select space 221 Instruction. Unobstructed. Unobstructed. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Unobstructed. under Identity Data. click in the floor plan to make it the active view.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In the left pane of the Open dialog.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. and double-click Level 2 . click Training Files. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you will understand the process. 279 .autodesk. At the end of this tutorial. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you can choose to save your work. After finishing each exercise. However. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. As you place the sprinklers. If the tutorial training files are not present. As you create the system. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. methodology. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.rvt. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. By following the recommended workflow.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. go to http://www.

When this happens. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. After placing the initial sprinkler. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. When there is a small misalignment. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 3 In the Project Browser.

because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. and 207. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. select the sprinklers that you placed. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. and click to place 3 sprinklers. Also. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. verify that Constrain is cleared. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 11 In the drawing area. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 10 Press Esc twice. 206. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. while pressing Ctrl. 9 In space Instruction 202. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205.

as shown.Fire Protection Piping Plan . open Design ➤ FP . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A.Design. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. you place non-hosted sprinklers. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 17 In the Project Browser.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Next. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. and then press Esc. and 200C). specify a vertical offset. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 18 Type WT. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 200B.

In this exercise. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. under Constraints. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. for Offset. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. and click Element Properties. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. 25 Click OK. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. 29 Press Esc. In the next exercise. Notice that the schedule updates. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. enter 4100. enter 11. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). 22 In the 200A Corridor space. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. move the cursor to the right. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. and with piping (physical connection). 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you adjust the offset.FP_Ceiling view. This number is determined in the schedule. Next. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and press Enter. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . For Number. enter 2900 mm. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down.0. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Right-click the sprinkler.19 In the floor plan. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. After creating the logical connection. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 .

However. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. 5 Right-click the header. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select Piping. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 1 In the Project Browser. click View ➤ Systems. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Fire Protection Plan . Unlike logical connections (systems). as shown. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. As you assign sprinklers to systems.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.Design is highlighted. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.

press Tab. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. In the System Browser. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. and click Select. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. Next. named Fire Protection Wet. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. within the Piping Systems folder. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. 11 With the system still selected. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. place the cursor over a sprinkler. indicating the logical connection. select an initial piping layout. and select the system. Creating a Piping System | 285 . and assign the selected sprinklers to it.

verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . as shown. 12 On the Options Bar. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. and a piping layout preview displays. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 13 In the System Browser. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. and on the Options Bar. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch.0 is specified. 15 In the drawing area. select Branch. 22 On the Options Bar. 23 For Offset. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). In the left pane. When the layout is finished. 14 Click Finish Editing System. 24 On the Generate Layout panel.Wet is selected. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for System Name. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. providing system editing tools. For Pipe Type. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. click Solutions. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. verify that Main is selected. enter -3650. for Diameter. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. The Generate Layout tools are activated. click Settings. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2.The Edit Piping System panel displays. verify that 2800. and number of elements in the system. system equipment. For Offset. select 150 mm. 19 Click OK. click Place Base. enter FP Wet_Zone2.

25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. Creating a Piping System | 287 . The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. verify that Network is selected. and select solution 4. On the Generate Layout panel. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. A (parallel movement control) displays. and green represents branch lines). Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. click Modify. In general.

This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. as shown. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. 32 If necessary. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. select a different layout solution. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 29 Click Finish Layout. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. or that offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. Either relocate the system components. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP .

and various manual pipe creation tools.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 1 In the Project Browser.33 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and then you create piping to physically connect them. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m.rvt. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the Connect Into tool. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. and select the elbow fitting as shown. 3 If necessary. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. Next. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. mechanical equipment. air terminals. you can select the pipe or duct. radiators. click Add To System. 9 On the Edit System panel. or a system component to display system tools. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. and pipe or duct is created. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 8 In the corridor. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 5 In the drawing area. click Finish Editing System.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor.

select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.11 On the Generate Layout panel. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. verify that Network is selected. 23 View the result in the 3D view.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 12 On the Options Bar. 18 Click Finish Editing System. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. verify that Solutions is selected. 13 Click Finish Layout. 21 In the Piping Plan. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and then tile the views. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. for Solution Type. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 14 Close the System Browser. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. and select solution 5. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area.

and click Draw Pipe. 27 On the Options Bar. 29 Using the same method. 25 Select the sprinkler. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.24 In the Piping Plan. and then press Esc. select 2800. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 28 In the drawing area. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. for Offset. right-click. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. select 1 : 50. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m.Fire Protection Piping Plan . Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. for Scale. 31 In the plan view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 4 On the Options Bar. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 .Design is highlighted. 33 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. Because the whole system highlights.

Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. double-click on the section head to open the section view. 8 Right-click.6 Press Esc. and click View Properties. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

select Design. and click Draw Pipe. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . 14 Select the tee fitting. drag the top section boundary line up. select MEP Section. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 15 Press Spacebar.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. Under Identity Data. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 If necessary. for View Name. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. For View Classification. 10 In the Project Browser. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. enter 2135. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 22 In the drawing area. and then right-click the top connector. Click OK. select FP . 17 Move the cursor up.Fire Protection Plan . Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. right-click Design ➤ FP . and click Apply Default View Template. for Sub-Discipline. and press Enter.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.Design. For Default View Template. and then click Modify.Design the active view. 19 Make Level 2 . 13 Select the elbow fitting. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . enter FP Section_Stair. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .

24 Select the cabinet. 26 On the Options Bar. and then click Modify.23 In the section view. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. verify that Automatically Connect is active. select . 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . zoom to the hose reel cabinet. and click Draw Pipe. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). 27 On the Placement Tools panel. for Diameter.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 Verify that Fire Protection .

A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.rfa. verify that M_Gate Valve . navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. click Yes to load a family. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . 31 In the alert dialog.50 mm is selected. 33 In the Type Selector. and then click Modify.29 Close the section view. 32 In the Open dialog. as shown. and click Open.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. click Training Files. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers.rvt. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views.

or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. 8 Click Modify. width. click Check None. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. for Diameter. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. select 25mm. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). 4 In the floor plan view. or height. width. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . 6 In the Filter dialog. or width. and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. Changing the diameter. height.

. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . NOTE Tags are view specific. Press Esc. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. By hiding the linked file. and after each segment highlights. select the linked architectural file. and click Open. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.rfa. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. 17 On the View Control Bar. click to place the tag. Clear Leader.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. 12 If necessary. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. 18 In the 3D view. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. They display only in the view in which they were placed.

20 Click to select the main piping between these points.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. 21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . and when the section highlights. press Tab. select 100mm. The main piping is selected and displays in red. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 24 In the drawing area. select 40mm. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. 23 Close the 3D view. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. for Diameter. 25 On the Options Bar. The pipe diameter is modified. and then tag the piping as shown. as shown. 26 Using the same method. and maximize the floor plan.

rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. you created a wet fire protection system. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. You added tags to pipes. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. In this tutorial. In this exercise. For additional practice. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters.

304 .

Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions. create details. 305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.

306 .

right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. and apply a view template. matchlines.Design ➤ Floor Plans. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. If the view included detail graphics. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click Copy of Level 1. and view references. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 In the Rename View dialog. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. 2 In the Project Browser. dependent views. click Training Files. and click Properties.rvt. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and click OK. and click Rename. 307 .Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view.

under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. 4 Using the same method. and click OK. click Training Files. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click Apply Default View Template. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. views and put them on the sheet. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. create dependent views for areas B and C. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . more focused. 9 Click OK. and click OK. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 10 In the drawing area. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. and click Rename. and then press Esc. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 3 In the Rename View dialog. as shown. 7 Close the file without saving. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m.rvt. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation.5 In the Instance Properties dialog.

In the Color dialog. Click OK. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. For Line Weight. 19 In the drawing area. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. and click OK.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select 11. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. For Line Pattern. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. and then press Esc. 14 Click Finish Matchline. select black. select Double Dash . click the current value. 13 Press Esc twice. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.

crop the dependent views for plans B and C. as shown. 21 Using the same method. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 25 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.20 Select the upper view reference and. on the Options Bar. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. for Target view. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference.

under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. For Default View Template. right-click 3D Plumbing. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and zoom to each of the view references. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 27 Using the same method. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click Properties.Domestic Water. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select the section box.rvt. enter Plumbing Isometric . 29 Close the file with or without saving it. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. click Training Files. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 4 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. select Plumbing Isometric. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. for View Name.

select 3. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .Domestic Water. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. right-click Plumbing Isometric . 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. For Pattern. 10 Right-click. and click Apply Default View Template. and click to select it. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. The section crop lines no longer display. select Plumbing. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. For Sub-Discipline. for View Classification. select Dash. and then click OK.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Click Apply. select Documentation. Click OK. 6 In the Project Browser.

change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. 13 Using the same method. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click to select it. press Tab 3 times.

14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. 15 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. as shown). This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click to select it. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.

select 1. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar. verify that Common is selected. and in the Type Selector.5mm Arial. specify Plumbing . Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. 19 Using methods learned previously.Sanitary Waste.16 Press Esc. For Slope. click on the Format value. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. and in the view properties. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and for Default View Template. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.Isometric.

indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use a plan view to create a callout view. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. When the view is associated with a sheet. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. 26 Press Esc twice. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.■ In the Format dialog. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. and then place the callout view on a sheet. as shown. 22 Click OK twice. for Rounding.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. select To the nearest 10. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to place the spot slope annotation.

for Scale. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). Creating Callout Views | 317 . 5 On the Options Bar. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. select 1 : 50. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right.

double-click M601 . select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. Click OK. under Sheets (all). 13 In the Project Browser. drag it to the sheet. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. using the same method. and select the viewport. for Line Weight.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. select 5.

16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. right-click the callout view. Creating Callout Views | 319 . and click Apply Default View Template. For Default View Template. For Title on Sheet. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. Click OK. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. enter WSHP PART PLAN. for View Name.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 17 In the Project Browser.

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.

and click Rename. 25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . enter Typical WSHP Detail. under Names. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click OK.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. right-click the detail view.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click Apply View Template. Creating Callout Views | 321 . 26 In the Rename View dialog.

322 .

under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. click Training Files. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. duct tags. as shown. symbols. 323 . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. and annotation to create a legend. In the left pane of the Open dialog. linetypes. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. Creating Annotations In this exercise.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. work with model-based components. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C.

4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 9 Press Esc twice. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select 1. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 8 With the text still selected.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.

Creating Annotations | 325 . and then click Right Straight. 16 In the drawing area. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 15 On the Options Bar. verify that Leader is cleared. a segment of round duct. and a segment of rectangular duct. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. as shown. select a supply diffuser. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. a return diffuser.

Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.17 Click Modify. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Ducts. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 24 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Tags dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. under Category. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. and click Open. as shown. If necessary.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. tag the remaining diffusers in the area.rfa. 20 In the Tags dialog. clear Leader. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. click Load. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 25 In the drawing area. and click OK.

open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. and Attached End.26 On the Options Bar. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. and then press Esc. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 32 In the drawing area. select Horizontal. Leader. Creating Annotations | 327 . 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 31 On the Options Bar. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A.

328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .33 On the Options Bar. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 34 In the drawing area. as shown. 36 Press Esc twice. for Leader. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. select Free End.

Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 40 Using the method learned previously. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. you use temporary dimensions to locate. That’s because you changed a type property. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and lock lighting fixtures. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 37 In the drawing area. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. select the last tag placed. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. and all elements of that type are affected. for Leader Arrowhead. Creating Dimensions | 329 . lay out. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. not simply an instance property. and click OK. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

select the dimension line. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 14 Using the same method. and then select the interior face of the wall. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. On the Options Bar. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 12 Click EQ. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 13 Press Esc. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines.

and press Enter. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. annotation symbols. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. and notes. Creating a Legend | 331 . linework.rvt. click the 3 interior locks on the line. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. 17 Press Esc. and offset them from the wall. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. enter 2430. Because the dimensions are locked. 20 Using the same methods. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. click Training Files.9).

5 Click in the drawing area. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.200 Neck. 10 Using the same method. and select 1.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . enter Diffuser Legend. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. Click OK. ■ 9 In the drawing area. select 1 : 50.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . For View. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. click below the title to place the diffuser. For Scale.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. select Floor Plan.

11 Press Esc. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. and select 1.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 14 In the drawing area. Creating a Legend | 333 . click next to the top diffuser. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.

21 Press Esc. 24 Select the component’s break line. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 27 While pressing Ctrl. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 26 Press Esc. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.DROP and its text note.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. The selected detail lines are now thin.

in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. and then click Modify.MECHANICAL LEGEND.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 34 Using the method learned previously. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Creating a Legend | 335 . 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.30 Select Spot Elevation . enter E. and then click Modify. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 40 Press Esc. and select Title w Line . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. A drafting view using detail components.rvt. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. detail groups. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Detailing 15 In this lesson. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. and text. 337 . A detail callout that references another view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .113 East elevation view. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram.

113 East on the sheet. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the Power Riser . 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 4 On the Options Bar. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. and then modify and align the views. 8 Using the same method.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select each of the 2 panelboards. Next. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . place Power Riser . and click to place it. clear Leader. 5 In the drawing area.

select the 113 North view. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. right-click. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . for Title on Sheet. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click Deactivate View. and click OK. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. giving the appearance of a single view. and click Activate View. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. under Identity Data.9 Press Esc. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Right-click.

Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 21 Using the drag control. you add wiring to the diagram. right-click. and click Activate View.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select the 113 East elevation view. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. In the next exercise. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 22 Press Esc. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. and select Title w Line . move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. as shown. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.

verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. notice that there are no snaps active. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. for Name. select 6. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. Under Modify Subcategories. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. In the New Subcategory dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 9 Beginning at the transformer. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Electrical Power. verify that Chain is selected. click New. click Training Files. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. In the Line Styles dialog. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. and then click OK. for Line Weight.113 North view. and click OK. As you draw. 8 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. as shown. expand Lines. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB).rvt. 2 Close the Project Browser. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser.

enter 3mm. 11 Using the same method. as shown. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 13 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.10 Press Esc.

TIP When you use the Trim tool. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. so that the result is as shown.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. as shown.

Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 33 On the Options Bar. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. and select 1. 28 Click above the cap. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Click Modify. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . select Multiple. 31 While pressing Ctrl. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

36 Press Esc. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

and press Enter. and then press Esc. 40 Press Esc. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. enter 12.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . Press Esc. Using the same method. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. and press Enter. change the length of the bottom line to 3. 39 Move the cursor to the right. enter 7. enter 3. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 42 On the Options Bar.0. click on the length dimension value. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. you can ensure that they stay together. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. You enter exact values for each line length. for Offset.

and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. select all 3 lines. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. for Name. and click OK. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 50 With the group selected. 52 Select the detail group.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 51 Using the method learned previously. enter Ground. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. TP-2B. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 47 In the drawing area. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 46 In the Project Browser. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 54 Select the group. while pressing Ctrl. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and then press Esc. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations.

and will place it on sheet E01. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. In later exercises.

right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. 4 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click OK. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Apply View Template. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 6 In the Rename View dialog. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). and then press Esc. select 3D Views. 8 On the ViewCube. 5 Right-click the copy. click Training Files. and double click Typical Make Up Air. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. Back. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. and then click the corner where the Top.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and Left sides converge. Walkthroughs. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 3 Select the section box. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . click Home. and click Rename. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to view the section.

select 3D HVAC Iso. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.■ ■ Under Names. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). and click to specify the second leader point. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Typical. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 15 Using the same method. Move the cursor down and to the left. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). Click OK. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected.

under Extents. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. and then click OK. select Crop Region Visible. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 19 Complete the text labels. 23 Click on the crop region.18 Press Esc. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. and under Extents. To rotate and reposition a text label. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. as shown. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area.

and click View Properties. click Training Files. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. select Crop View and Section Box. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and click OK. and click Activate View. clear Crop Region Visible. Place a detail component. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. scroll down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 29 Right click the view. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. 33 Right-click the view. 32 In the Instance Properties. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view.25 Click OK. 30 On the View Control Bar.rvt. and click Deactivate View. Use detail lines to create a detail group. and under Extents. specify 1 : 2 for the scale.

as shown. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. and click Properties. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Click OK. 13 In the drawing area. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. for Sub-Discipline. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 Zoom in to the component. select Plumbing.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. as the rectangle start point. click the point at the top of the drain. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Documentation. 3 In the Project Browser. For View Classification. Click OK. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. For Scale. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. select 1 : 5. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 12 On the Element panel. right-click the view name.

16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Select 1. for Type. and click OK.I. 18 With the filled region still selected.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. select C. Concrete. 22 Click Modify. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . and then press Esc. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140.P. 21 In the drawing area.

press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 23 In the drawing area. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 31 On the Options Bar. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . (Line). 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 34 Press Esc. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. select Multiple. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. select the filled region. and then click to select them. 28 Click Modify. and then click point 6 as the endpoint.

40 Click Finish Region. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. and then select the side of the slab above the line. Drafting Detail Components | 357 .35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. and then press Esc. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.

Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 45 Using the method learned previously. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. and click OK. press Tab to highlight the chain. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. and then click to select them. 52 In the Create Group dialog. enter Flashing Membrane_F. select the Flashing Membrane group. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Name. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. draw wide detail lines as shown. (Rectangle).D. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 49 Click Modify. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines.

as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 61 Using the same method. as shown. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 55 Press Esc. press Spacebar twice. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge.

360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 67 On the Options Bar. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. as shown. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object.62 Press Esc twice. select Leader and Free End. 64 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region.

75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 80 Press Esc twice. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 76 To select the leader start point. and click to specify the text insertion point. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view.70 In the Keynotes dialog.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. and click to specify the second leader point.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click OK. select 15000 (Division 15 . click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 72 If necessary. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 71 Click Modify. 81 Select the text note. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 84 Using the following image as a guide. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. as shown. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.82 Continue annotating the detail.

Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the view title. 90 Press Esc. and then press Esc twice.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 88 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . and click to place it. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. open P103 . 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful